Lexmark Xm5163 Owner S Manual User's Guide

Lexmark-Lexmark-Xm5170-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-xm5170-owner-s-manual

2014-07-06

: Lexmark Lexmark-Lexmark-Xm5163-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-xm5163-owner-s-manual lexmark pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 366 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

XM5100 Series
User's Guide
September 2012 www.lexmark.com
Machine type(s):
7463
Model(s):
096, 296
Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................8
Learning about the printer.........................................................................10
Finding information about the printer....................................................................................................10
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................11
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................12
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................14
Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................15
Understanding the printer control panel....................................................16
Using the printer control panel...............................................................................................................16
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights........................................................16
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................17
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................19
Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................21
Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................21
Finding the IP address of the computer..................................................................................................21
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................22
Customizing the home screen.................................................................................................................22
Understanding the different applications...............................................................................................23
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................23
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................23
Setting up Forms and Favorites ........................................................................................................................23
Setting up Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................24
Using MyShortcut .............................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Multi Send .......................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Scan to Network ..............................................................................................................................26
Setting up Remote Operator Panel...................................................................................................................27
Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................27
Additional printer setup.............................................................................29
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................29
Available internal options.................................................................................................................................29
Accessing the controller board .........................................................................................................................30
Installing a memory card ..................................................................................................................................33
Installing an optional card ................................................................................................................................35
Contents 2
Installing an Internal Solutions Port..................................................................................................................37
Installing a printer hard disk .............................................................................................................................42
Removing a printer hard disk............................................................................................................................48
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................50
Order of installation..........................................................................................................................................50
Installing optional trays ....................................................................................................................................50
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................53
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................55
Installing the printer software ..........................................................................................................................55
Updating available options in the printer driver ..............................................................................................56
Networking..............................................................................................................................................57
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network..................................................................................57
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network ..................................................................................................58
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network.....................................................................................59
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard.................................................................................60
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup ....................................................61
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server.............................................61
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port................................................62
Setting up serial printing...................................................................................................................................63
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................65
Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................65
Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................65
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................66
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................66
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................66
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray........................................................................................................66
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray...................................................................................................................72
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................78
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................82
Linking and unlinking trays ...............................................................................................................................82
Creating a custom name for a paper type ........................................................................................................83
Assigning a custom paper type .........................................................................................................................83
Paper and specialty media guide................................................................85
Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................85
Tips on using card stock....................................................................................................................................85
Tips on using envelopes....................................................................................................................................85
Tips on using labels...........................................................................................................................................86
Tips on using letterhead ...................................................................................................................................86
Tips on using transparencies ............................................................................................................................87
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................87
Contents 3
Paper characteristics.........................................................................................................................................87
Selecting paper .................................................................................................................................................88
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead ......................................................................................................88
Using recycled paper and other office papers..................................................................................................88
Storing paper ....................................................................................................................................................90
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................90
Paper sizes supported by the printer................................................................................................................90
Paper types and weights supported by the printer ..........................................................................................92
Printing......................................................................................................93
Printing forms and a document...............................................................................................................93
Printing from a mobile device.................................................................................................................94
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................95
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................97
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................99
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................99
Copying....................................................................................................101
Making copies.......................................................................................................................................101
Copying photos......................................................................................................................................102
Copying on specialty media...................................................................................................................102
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel.....................................................................103
Customizing copy settings.....................................................................................................................104
Placing information on copies...............................................................................................................109
Canceling a copy job..............................................................................................................................110
Understanding the copy options...........................................................................................................110
E-mailing..................................................................................................113
Setting up the printer to e-mail.............................................................................................................113
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................114
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................115
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................116
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................117
Understanding the e-mail options........................................................................................................117
Faxing......................................................................................................120
Setting up the printer to fax..................................................................................................................120
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................135
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................138
Contents 4
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................139
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................140
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................140
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................141
Scanning...................................................................................................144
Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................144
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................144
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................147
Understanding the scan options...........................................................................................................149
Understanding the printer menus............................................................152
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................152
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................153
Reports Menu........................................................................................................................................164
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................165
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................178
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................183
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................228
Saving money and the environment.........................................................229
Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................229
Using recycled paper ......................................................................................................................................229
Conserving supplies ........................................................................................................................................229
Saving energy........................................................................................................................................230
Using Eco‑Mode..............................................................................................................................................230
Reducing printer noise....................................................................................................................................230
Adjusting Sleep mode .....................................................................................................................................231
Using Hibernate mode....................................................................................................................................232
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display ..............................................................................................232
Recycling................................................................................................................................................233
Recycling Lexmark products ...........................................................................................................................233
Recycling Lexmark packaging..........................................................................................................................233
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling......................................................................................233
Securing the printer..................................................................................235
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................235
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................235
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................236
Contents 5
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................236
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................237
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................238
Maintaining the printer............................................................................239
Cleaning the printer parts.....................................................................................................................239
Cleaning the printer ........................................................................................................................................239
Cleaning the scanner glass..............................................................................................................................240
Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................242
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel.........................................................242
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server .................................................242
Ordering parts and supplies..................................................................................................................243
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies.....................................................................................................243
Estimated number of remaining pages...........................................................................................................243
Ordering a toner cartridge..............................................................................................................................243
Ordering an imaging unit ................................................................................................................................243
Ordering a maintenance kit ............................................................................................................................244
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................245
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................245
Replacing the toner cartridge .........................................................................................................................245
Replacing the imaging unit .............................................................................................................................247
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................251
Before moving the printer ..............................................................................................................................251
Moving the printer to another location..........................................................................................................252
Shipping the printer ........................................................................................................................................252
Managing the printer...............................................................................253
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................253
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................253
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................253
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................253
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................254
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................255
Clearing jams............................................................................................256
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................256
Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................257
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]..............................................................259
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]...........................................................................................262
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]..................................................................263
Contents 6
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]......................................................................................265
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239].......................................................................266
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]..........................................................................................................267
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250]..............................................................................................268
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................270
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................272
Understanding printer messages..........................................................................................................272
Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................289
Solving print problems..........................................................................................................................296
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................322
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................325
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................331
Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................336
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................336
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................337
Notices.....................................................................................................338
Product information..............................................................................................................................338
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................338
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................342
Index........................................................................................................355
Contents 7
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
•Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Safety information 8
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 9
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
•Connecting the printer
•Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•Loading paper
•Configuring printer settings
•Viewing and printing documents and photos
•Setting up and using the printer software
•Configuring the printer on a network
•Caring for and maintaining the printer
•Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available on the Documentation CD.
For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
Instructions for:
•Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network
•Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Networking Guide—Open the Software CD, and then look
for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs
folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking
Guide link.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
•The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Learning about the printer 10
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
•Documentation
•Driver downloads
•Live chat support
•E‑mail support
•Voice support
Lexmark Support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the Support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
•Machine Type number
•Serial number
•Date purchased
•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or at
http://support.lexmark.com.
•In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
•Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•Keep the printer:
–Clean, dry, and free of dust.
–Away from stray staples and paper clips.
–Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
•Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
•Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 11
4
32
1
5
1Right side 15 cm (6 in.)
2Front 39.4 cm (15.5 in.)
3Left side 15 cm (6 in.)
4Rear 15 cm (6 in.)
5Top 15 cm (6 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Learning about the printer 12
Basic model
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2ADF tray
3ADF bin
4Standard bin
5Printer control panel
6100‑sheet multipurpose feeder
7Standard 550‑sheet tray
Learning about the printer 13
Fully configured model
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional trays that are supported by the printer. For more
information on other configurations, visit www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
4
1
2
3
1Optional 550‑sheet tray
2Optional 250‑sheet trays
3Caster base
4Optional 2100‑sheet tray
When using optional trays:
•Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with an optional 2100‑sheet tray.
•The optional 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration and may be paired with only one
optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray.
•You may combine three optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet trays and install them in any order.
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
•Send a fax using the printer control panel.
•Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
•Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
•Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Learning about the printer 14
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including two-
sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
When using the ADF:
•Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
•Load up to 150 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
•Scan sizes from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) wide to 216 x 635 mm (8.5 x 25 inches) long
•Scan media weighs from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14–32 lb).
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
•Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
•Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
•Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.
Learning about the printer 15
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
1@ ! . 2A B C 3D E F
4G H I 5J K L 6M N O
7P Q R S 8T U V 9W X Y Z
*0
#
C
876
123
4
5
9
Use the To
1Display •View the printer status and messages.
•Set up and operate the printer.
2Home button Go to the home screen.
3Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•Touch the screen or press any hard button.
•Open a door or cover.
•Send a print job from the computer.
•Perform a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch.
•Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
4Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
6Clear All / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
7Cancel button Cancel all printer activity.
8Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
9USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator
lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.
Understanding the printer control panel 16
Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status
Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status
Sleep button light Printer status
Off The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.
6
1
12 11 10
7
8
2 3 4 5
9
13
14
Touch To
1Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary language of
the printer.
2Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
Understanding the printer control panel 17
Touch To
5FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
6Arrows Scroll up or down.
7Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8Menu icon Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
9Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.
10 USB Drive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
12 Status/Supplies •Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.
•Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
13 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14 Search Held Jobs Search for one or more of the following items:
•User name for held or confidential print jobs
•Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•Profile names
•Bookmark container or print job names
•USB container or print job names for supported file types
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line
Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Understanding the printer control panel 18
Feature Description
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Printer IP address
Example:
123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the
home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can
use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and
remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the
printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
763
4
1
52
Touch To
1Arrows View a list of options.
2Copy It Print a copy.
3Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4Home Go to the home screen.
5Increase Select a higher value.
6Decrease Select a lower value.
7Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Understanding the printer control panel 19
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept Save a setting.
Cancel •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset Reset values on the screen.
Understanding the printer control panel 20
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active applications.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit
www.lexmark.com or inquire at your point of purchase.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
•From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Finding the IP address of the computer
Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or
wireless).
The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:
•Forms and Favorites
•Multi Send
•Scan to Network
For Windows users
1Open the command window.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type cmd > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.
Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
3Look for IP Address.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
For Macintosh users
Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.
1From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network
2Click Ethernet, Wi‑Fi, or AirPort.
3Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4Look for IPv4 Address.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do one or more of the following:
•Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
aClick Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
bSelect the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
cClick Submit.
•Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 23 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
Understanding the different applications
Use To
Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy”
on page 24.
Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
120.
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
Multi Send” on page 25.
MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut”
on page 25.
Scan to E‑mail Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on
page 113.
Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 148.
Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning
to an FTP address” on page 145.
Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting
up Scan to Network” on page 26.
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 22.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then do either of the following:
•Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
•Click Software and Solutions, and then select either of the following:
–Scan to Network—Find information about the Scan to Network application.
–Other Applications—Find information about the other applications.
2Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information
on the card in a more convenient manner.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
3Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
•Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
•Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application
is used.
•Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the
scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
•Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
•Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
–When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for
black and white.
–When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.
•Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or e-
mail jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are
correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the
computer” on page 21.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display.
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
•The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
•The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4Click Apply.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
aClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
bFrom the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
cClick Configure, and then do either of the following:
•To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to
save the configuration file.
Notes:
–When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
–If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
•To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was
exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
–Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
–If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 27
3To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
aClick Settings > Import/Export.
bDo either of the following:
•To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions
on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
•To import a configuration file, do the following:
1Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration
file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2Click Submit.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 28
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
Available internal options
•Memory card
–DDR3 DIMM
–Flash memory
•Fonts
•Firmware cards
–Forms barcode
–PRESCRIBE
–IPDS
–Printcryption
•LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
–Parallel 1284-B interface
–MarkNetTM N8350 802.11 b/g/n wireless printer server
–MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface
–RS-232-C serial interface
Additional printer setup 29
Accessing the controller board
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Open the controller board access cover.
2Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws on the controller board shield.
Additional printer setup 30
3Remove the shield.
21
4Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
1
2
3
1Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
2Option card connector
3Memory card connector
Additional printer setup 31
5Reattach the shield, and then align the screws with the holes.
12
6Tighten the screws on the shield.
Additional printer setup 32
7Close the access cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.
2Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
Additional printer setup 33
3Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
4Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.
5Reattach the controller board shield, and then the controller board access cover.
Additional printer setup 34
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them
off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.
2Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
2
1
Additional printer setup 35
4Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.
5Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 56.
Additional printer setup 36
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.
2If a printer hard disk is installed, then remove the printer hard disk first.
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 48.
3Unpack the ISP kit.
2
3
4
1
1ISP solution
2Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP
3Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield
4Plastic bracket
Additional printer setup 37
4Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
aLoosen the screw.
bLift the metal cover, and then pull it out completely.
1 2 3
Additional printer setup 38
5Align the posts of the plastic bracket to the holes on the controller board cage, and then press the plastic bracket
on the controller board cage until it clicks into place.
Note: Make sure that the plastic bracket has latched completely, and that the plastic bracket is seated firmly on
the cage.
6Install the ISP on the plastic bracket.
Note: Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the
ISP opening in the cage.
Additional printer setup 39
7Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket.
8Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP.
Note: Turn the screw clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten it yet.
Additional printer setup 40
9Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield.
10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not screw it on too tightly.
Additional printer setup 41
11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.
2Unpack the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 42
3Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
Additional printer setup 43
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
aRemove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
bAlign the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press the printer hard disk down
until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
cInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 44
To install a printer hard disk directly on the controller board cage:
aAlign the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage, and then press the printer
hard disk down until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
Additional printer setup 45
bUse the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
cInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 46
Additional printer setup 47
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.
2Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the printer
hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before
pulling out the cable.
Additional printer setup 48
3Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
4Remove the printer hard disk.
5Set aside the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 49
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:
•Caster base
•2100‑sheet tray or spacer
•Optional 550‑ or 250‑sheet tray
•Printer
For more information on installing a caster base, optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray, spacer, or 2100‑sheet tray, see the
setup sheet that came with the option.
Installing optional trays
The printer supports the following optional input sources:
•250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
•2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Additional printer setup 50
12
2Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
3Pull out the tray completely from the base.
4Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5Insert the tray into the base.
6Place the tray near the printer.
7Lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer, then align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower
the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.
Additional printer setup 51
8Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Additional printer setup 52
21
Note: When the printer software and any optional trays are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 56.
To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until
it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Additional printer setup 53
4
5
6
7
3
Use the To
1EXT port Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and
the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the
printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
2LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack
(RJ‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access
the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
3Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
5Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network.
6Internal Solutions Port (ISP) or
printer hard disk slot
Note: If the printer has support
for wireless connection, then the
wireless antenna is attached
here.
Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk.
7USB port Attach an optional wireless network adapter.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, or the printer in the area
shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Additional printer setup 54
Organizing cables
Attach the Ethernet cable and power cord, and then neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Notes:
•If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.
•Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.
•For Macintosh users, you may download all the drivers and utilities from our Web site.
Additional printer setup 55
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software CD that came with your printer
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK.
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Updating available options in the printer driver
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make
them available for use.
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Depending on your device, do either of the following:
•Press and hold the printer you want to update.
•Right‑click the printer you want to update.
Additional printer setup 56
3From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•For earlier versions, select Properties.
4Click the Configuration tab.
5Do either of the following:
•Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
•Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
•System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.
Networking
Notes:
•Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.
For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the setup sheet that came with the adapter.
•A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
•A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
•The network gateway
•The network mask
•A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.
Additional printer setup 57
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network
For Windows users
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software CD that came with your printer
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.
7Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2Obtain the printer IP address either:
•From the printer control panel
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3Install the printer driver on the computer.
aDownload the driver at http://support.lexmark.com.
bDouble‑click the installer package for the printer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
cSelect a destination, and then click Continue.
Additional printer setup 58
dFrom the Easy Install screen, click Install.
eType the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.
fClick Close when installation is complete.
4Add the printer.
•For IP printing:
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–System Preferences > Print & Scan
–System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +.
cClick the IP tab.
dType the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
•For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
•Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
–802.1X–RADIUS
Additional printer setup 59
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X user name and password
•Certificates
–No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
–If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.
–To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
•A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
•Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2Select a wireless connection setup.
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Additional printer setup 60
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
•The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
•A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start Push Button Method
2Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start PIN Method
2Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
•The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
•Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
•A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
Additional printer setup 61
3Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.
4Click Submit.
5Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
6To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:
•If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
•If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes to your computer configurations.
•If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If
the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on.
•Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,
turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch
to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.
For Windows users
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick , or click Start and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
Additional printer setup 62
cPress Enter, or click OK.
3To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:
•Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
•Right‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
4Click the Ports tab.
5Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
6Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
7Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Add the printer.
•For IP printing:
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–System Preferences > Print & Scan
–System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +.
cClick the IP tab.
dType the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
•For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer > Add
Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed.
Additional printer setup 63
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1Set the parameters in the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
bLocate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
cSave the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2Install the printer driver.
aObtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software CD that came with your printer
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
bDouble‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
1Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
cClick Install.
dFollow the instructions on the computer screen.
eSelect Advanced, and then click Continue.
fFrom the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.
gIf the port is not in the list, then click Refresh or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK
hClick Continue > Finish.
3Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
aOpen Device Manager.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK
Additional printer setup 64
In Windows 7 or earlier
1Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3Press Enter or click OK.
bDouble‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
cDo either of the following:
•Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
•Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
dClick Properties.
eOn the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.
fClick OK, and then close all the dialogs.
gPrint a test page to verify printer installation.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
•Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.
•Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a
network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids
network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Additional printer setup 65
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 256 and “Storing paper” on page 90.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:
•The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 76.2 mm (3 x 3 inches).
•The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).
•When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent
damage to the fuser.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray completely.
Notes:
•When loading folio‑, legal‑, or officio‑sized paper, lift the tray slightly and pull it out.
•Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 66
2Squeeze, and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading until it
clicks into place.
2
1
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 67
3Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you
are loading.
3
12
Notes:
•Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
•Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 68
4Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
5Load the paper stack with printable side facedown for one‑sided printing.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided (duplex) printing
ABC
ABC
Loading paper and specialty media 69
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left
side of the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media 70
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
6For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then lock
the length guide.
Loading paper and specialty media 71
7Insert the tray.
8From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray completely.
2Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 72
Loading A5‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
bSqueeze, and then slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
12
Loading paper and specialty media 73
cRemove the A5 length guide from its holder.
12
dInsert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of paper you are loading.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Loading paper and specialty media 74
bIf the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length guide
is not attached, then proceed to step d.
cPut the A5 length guide in its holder.
2
1
Loading paper and specialty media 75
dSqueeze, and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
3Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
4Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown for one‑sided printing.
•Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
Loading paper and specialty media 76
One‑sided printing Two‑sided (duplex) printing
ABC
ABC
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
5Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media 77
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
6From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
Loading paper and specialty media 78
2Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 79
4Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
•Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
•Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5Load the paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Loading paper and specialty media 80
•Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
•Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
One‑sided (simplex) printing Two‑sided (duplex) printing
ABC
•Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
•Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
Loading paper and specialty media 81
6For custom- or Universal- size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Linking and unlinking trays
When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer will link those trays. When one linked tray
becomes empty, paper will feed from the next linked tray. We recommended giving all unique paper, such as letterhead
and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in will not automatically
link.
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
Loading paper and specialty media 82
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 66.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4Click Submit.
5Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3Touch Submit.
4Touch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Loading paper and specialty media 83
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Touch Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media 84
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•Make sure the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading it.
•The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site
http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly affect print quality.
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card
stock loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed
problems.
•Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Tips on using envelopes
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
•For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
•Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist.
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
–Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
–Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
–Have an interlocking design.
–Have postage stamps attached.
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
Paper and specialty media guide 85
–Have bent corners.
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
•Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
•Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels
loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
•Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
•Do not use labels with slick backing material.
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.
•Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using letterhead
•Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
•Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Before loading letterhead, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
•Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source Printing Printable side Paper orientation
Trays One‑sided Facedown Load the sheet with the
top edge toward the front
of the tray.
Trays Two‑sided Faceup Load the sheet with the
bottom edge entering the
printer first.
Multipurpose feeder One‑sided Faceup Load the sheet with the
top edge entering the
printer first.
Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided Facedown Load the sheet with the
bottom edge entering the
printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser
printers.
Paper and specialty media guide 86
Tips on using transparencies
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
•Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
•Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
•Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
•When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval
of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin. You can
also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on them:
Weight
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) grain
long paper. The 2100‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m2 (16–36‑lb) grain long paper.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick
paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Paper and specialty media guide 87
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
•Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
•Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
•Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
•Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.
•Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.
•When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
•Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
•Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
•Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
•Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Paper and specialty media guide 88
•Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
•Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
•Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
•Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)
•Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1Minimize paper consumption.
2Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple part forms or documents
Paper and specialty media guide 89
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
•Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
•Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper size1Dimensions Standard or
optional 250‑
or 550‑sheet
tray
2100‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
A4 210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.) 2
A6 105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.) X
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.) X
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes
that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not
available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer support.
2 Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.
3 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
4 When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 in.) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
Paper and specialty media guide 90
Paper size1Dimensions Standard or
optional 250‑
or 550‑sheet
tray
2100‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive 184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.) X
Oficio (México) 216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio 216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement 140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.) X
Universal3, 4 105 x 216 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 8.5 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
X
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.) XXX
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.) XXX
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.) XXX
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.) XXX
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.) XXX
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.) XXX
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
XXX
1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes
that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not
available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer support.
2 Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.
3 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
4 When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 in.) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
Paper and specialty media guide 91
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176‑g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type 250‑ or
550‑sheet tray
2100‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex ADF Scanner glass
Paper
Card Stock X X
Plain Envelope XXX
Rough Envelope XXX
Paper Labels X X
Pharmacy Labels X
Transparencies*X X
* Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see “Tips
on using transparencies” on page 87.
Paper and specialty media guide 92
Printing
Printing forms and a document
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
1From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2Depending on your printer model, touch , , or Submit.
Printing a document
1From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2Send the print job:
For Windows users
aWith a document open, click File > Print.
bClick Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
cAdjust the settings, if necessary.
dClick OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
aCustomize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3Click OK.
bCustomize the settings in the Print dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3Click Print.
Adjusting toner darkness
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Printing 93
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.
Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Printing 94
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer
display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents
from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the
memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory
device. Loss of data can occur.
Printing 95
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Printing 96
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.tiff or .tif
•.png
•.fls
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to
examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Printing 97
2Touch Submit.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Click Print and Hold.
4Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5Click OK or Print.
6From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4Click OK or Print.
5From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Printing 98
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user
are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of
the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Jobs or press on the keypad.
2Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
Printing 99
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Double‑click the printer icon.
3Select the print job you want to cancel.
4Click Delete.
For Macintosh users
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
•System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Printing 100
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are
the same.
3From the printer control panel, press .
Copying using the ADF
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Copying 101
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2Adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next
page.
3Touch Finish the Job.
Copying photos
1Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3From the Content Source menu, navigate to:
Photo/Film > > Copy It
Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
next page.
4Touch Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
Copying 102
3Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > > select the size of the transparencies > > Transparency >
4Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It
5If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead
6Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Copy.
2Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save as Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
Copying 103
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy > > Copy It
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >
5Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying 104
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > Letter > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 105
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while
the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided
original documents and you want two‑sided copies.
4Touch > Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Copy.
4From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to
fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
5Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Copying 106
5Touch .
6Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7Touch > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > > Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 107
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,”
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on
page 107.
4Select one of the following:
•Between Copies
•Between Jobs
•Between Pages
•Off
5Touch > Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
•Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want > > Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different settings.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
•If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
•If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.
•If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
Copying 108
For example:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On > > Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
5If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type
of header or footer you want
4Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
5Touch , and then press .
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and
Draft.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying 109
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1From the home screen, touch Cancel Job, or press on the keypad.
2Touch the job you want to cancel.
3Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
•Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
•To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
•To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
•Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
•If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
Copying 110
•If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic
scaling.
•When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy
to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
•To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Copying 111
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Advanced Duplex—This specifies the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and
how documents are bound.
•Advanced Imaging—This changes or adjusts Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before you copy the document.
•Create Booklet—This creates a booklet. You can choose between one‑sided and two‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
•Cover Page Setup—This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Header/Footer—This inserts date or time, page number, Bates number, or custom text, and then prints them in
the specified header or footer location.
•Margin Shift—This increases or reduces the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image. Touch
or to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
•Overlay—This creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word
you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
•Paper Saver—This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called
N-up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document
on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.
•Separator Sheets—This places a blank sheet of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.
•Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then displays an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Copying 112
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing 113
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings.
3From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses,
then separate each address with a comma.
5Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
5Touch .
6Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.
E-mailing 114
E-mailing a document
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the
e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut
application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications"
section.
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are
the same.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4Type the e‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:
•To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want
to add.
•You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5Touch Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add.
4Touch Send It.
E-mailing 115
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add, or search the address book.
5Touch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done
4Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
Changing the output file type
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
E-mailing 116
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
4Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
•PDF—Create a single file with multiple pages.
•Secure PDF—Create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
•TIFF—Create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs.
•XPS—Create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer‑hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.
5Touch > Send It.
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
E-mailing 117
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file
size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.
Note: PDF is the factory default setting.
•Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
•TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
•XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
E-mailing 118
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
e‑mail the document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
•Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then displays an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
E-mailing 119
Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to fax
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
Note: During the initial printer setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch
Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Faxing 120
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on
page 344.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities,
then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
aEnter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
bEnter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Faxing 121
Choosing a fax connection
Scenario 1: Standard telephone line
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Faxing 122
Tips for this setup:
•You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
•If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings
that you want.
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE
LINE
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer.
Faxing 123
Connected to different wall jacks
PHONE
LINE
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:
•If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).
•Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks
up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up
calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and
takes over the call.
•If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the
correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive
faxes automatically.
Faxing 124
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
02
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.
Tips for this setup:
•This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make
sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you
have set it to receive faxes automatically.
•If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone
to receive the fax.
Faxing 125
•You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice
mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.
Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax
signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use
the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter
for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and
static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
To install a filter for the printer:
1Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other
end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
Faxing 126
3To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer, and then
connect the telephone to the port.
Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.
Faxing 127
Tips for this setup:
•To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and
then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
•If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer
into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct
splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
Faxing 128
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer.
Notes:
•To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the
telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
•If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the
printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
•Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug
an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
Faxing 129
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer.
Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the
printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack
and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.
If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a
telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to
purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility
that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer.
Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519
Faxing 130
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device
has a non‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.
Notes:
•The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from
the port of the printer.
•In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.
Faxing 131
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.
NFN
Faxing 132
Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
NFN
PHONE
LINE
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as
shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded
telephone system.
Faxing 133
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
bSelect the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Faxing 134
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.
4Click Submit.
Sending a fax
You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e‑mail address,
use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the
printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User’s
Guide.
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Faxing 135
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Fax.
4Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut
number, or search the address book.
5Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax
4Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature
5If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.
8Click OK.
Notes:
•The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software CD.
•The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.
•If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Faxing 136
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on enabling the
address book feature, contact your system support person.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > > type the name of the recipient > Search
Note: You can search only for one name at a time.
4Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button does not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.
Faxing 137
4Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
5Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
3Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
•To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
•Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2Touch .
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Faxing 138
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.
Viewing a fax log
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Reports.
3Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Faxing 139
Blocking junk faxes
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
•This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
•In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want
to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while
Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing 140
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•Off
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled
4If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
aClick Fax Holding Schedule.
bFrom the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
cFrom the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
dFrom the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Faxing 141
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
•Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
•Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
•Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
•Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Faxing 142
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the
document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
•Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Faxing 143
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 26.
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Scanning 144
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
4Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > > type a name for the shortcut > Done
2Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
•If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
•If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
You can use the printer to send scanned documents to an FTP address in a number of ways. You can type the FTP
address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send, Scan to Network, or
MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen
applications" section of the User’s Guide.
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It
Scanning 145
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4Touch > Send It.
Scanning an FTP using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.
5Touch > Send It.
Scanning 146
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive images using Scan to Computer. You can scan the document back to the
computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are
ready to scan your documents.
7Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
aLoad an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Scanning 147
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
bIf you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
cDo either of the following:
•Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
•From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
8View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
•This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
•Make sure that your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Depending on your operating system, click Add devices and printers, Add a device, or Add a printer.
3Select your printer from the list.
Note: To identify your printer, print a network setup page, and then look for “Fully Qualified Domain Name” in
the TCP/IP section.
4Click Next > Close.
5Depending on your device, do either of the following:.
•Press and hold the printer you want to configure.
•Right‑click the printer you want to configure.
6From the menu that appears, select Scan Properties or Properties, and then change the settings as necessary.
Scanning 148
7From the printer control panel, touch Scan to Computer and then select from the following options:
•Scan—Scan and save the document directly to a selected location on the computer.
•Scan for Print—Scan and automatically print the document.
•Scan for E‑mail—Attach a scanned document to an e‑mail.
•Scan for Fax—Attach a scanned document to be sent through fax.
8Touch Send It.
Remote scan in progress appears on the printer display. The scanned image opens automatically on the
computer screen.
Scanning to a flash drive
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Scanning 149
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes,
you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
•Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
•TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
•XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Scanning 150
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
scan the document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
•Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Scanning 151
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security Settings
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup
Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Active NIC
Standard Network1
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security
Settings
Confidential Print
Disk Wiping
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Help Manage Shortcuts Option Card Menu2
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E-mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
A list of installed DLEs
(Download Emulators)
appears.
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
•Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
•First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the
print job continues using the linked tray.
•The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose
feeder.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
•If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
•Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Use To
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The
paper size value must be set.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder Type
to appear as a menu.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Use To
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual Paper
Type to appear as a menu.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Use To
Default ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom [x]
Specify the media type being loaded in the ADF.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
•All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
•Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
•Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•These options appear only if card stock is supported.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Use To
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 158
Use To
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Use To
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock
as the paper type.
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled
as the paper type.
Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as
the paper type.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl
Labels as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as
the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead
as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted
as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Colored
as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light as
the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as
the paper type.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or
Cotton as the paper type.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Use To
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Custom [x]
as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type
name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server
or from MarkVisionTM Professional.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Media Type
ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Enveloope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Width
1–8.5 inches (25–216 mm)
Height
1–25 inches (25–635.0 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
On
Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan size
name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Notes:
•ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4,
5, and 6.
•Rough/Cotton is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 1 and 2.
•8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Width.
•14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.
•Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
•Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
•Inches is the US factory default setting.
•Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Use To
Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–216 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
•If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
•8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.
•216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
•If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
•14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
•356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Notes:
•Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.
Reports Menu
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, printer control panel
language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection,
and other information.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number
of printed pages.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer,
such as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Use To
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
•This menu is supported only in select printer models.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
•This menu is supported only in select printer models.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk.
Notes:
•Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
•Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is working and
installed correctly.
Asset Report Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The value can be changed in 1KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use To
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Use To
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
•“90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Use To
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the
automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
View Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 169
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless
network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
•Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
•Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer
and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional
wireless network adapter is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Understanding the printer menus 170
Use To
Activate
Yes
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 171
Use To
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 172
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 173
Use To
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
•Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
•Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
Off
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 174
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
•When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
•When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
•The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 175
Use To
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
•DTR is the factory default setting.
•DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
On
Off
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
•9600 is the factory default setting.
•138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 176
Use To
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Honor DSR
On
Off
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan‑to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 177
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
•Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail*
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use To
Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password
•Off
•On
Password
Create a backup password.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
•This menu item appears only if a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,
Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]
Add or edit a security template.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Use To
Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
•“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts is the factory default setting.
•“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
•“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
•“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1
to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 120
seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults
Change the value of the security settings.
Notes:
•Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
•“No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security
configuration.
•“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Embedded
Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 179
Use To
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
•“Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated
immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.
•“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.
•“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored, and then the session proceeds normally.
•“Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Notes:
•If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those
print jobs does not change to the new default value.
•If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 180
Use To
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All
permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for disk wiping.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
•“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to
turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.
•Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass
method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:
•To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.
•The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved
on a computer.
Understanding the printer menus 181
Use To
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7
Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.
Notes:
•Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
•Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.
•Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
•If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Set Date/Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DST
On
Off
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Enable the user to set up the time zone.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.
Understanding the printer menus 182
Use To
Enable Authentication
On
Off
Change the authentication setting to On or Off.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may
need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
•The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
•Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.
•Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
Understanding the printer menus 183
Use To
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is
loaded.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
ADF Multi‑feed Sensor
On
Off
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
•On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.
•For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.
•Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Instruct the printer to run the setup wizard.
Notes:
•Yes is the factory default setting.
•After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
“Country select” screen, the default becomes No.
Understanding the printer menus 184
Use To
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and
symbols from the keyboard.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the default paper measurement.
Notes:
•U.S. is the factory default setting.
•The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
•Changing this also changes the default setting for each input
source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 185
Use To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
home screen.
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following
options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
•IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•“Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to
display.”
•“Default” is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”
Understanding the printer menus 186
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper
Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•“No” is the factory default setting for “Display.”
•“Default” is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do Not display
Notes:
•“Display” is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax, E‑mail,
FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held jobs, USB Drive, and Forms and
Favorites.
•“Do not display” is the factory default setting for Change
Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, Email Shortcuts,
FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Solutions, Bookmarks, and Jobs
by user.
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Notes:
•MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
•DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the printer time.
Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 187
Use To
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy
Off
On
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
Off
Dim
Bright
Set the amount of light from the standard bin.
Notes:
•Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy
or Energy/Paper.
•Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is Off or set
to Paper.
Error Lighting
On
Off
Determine if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters
errors.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
Off
Provide touch‑screen sensation feedback.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Show Bookmarks
Yes
No
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax,
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image will be removed.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Notes:
•“Job level” is the factory default setting.
•If “Job level” is selected, then the entire job must be
rescanned if any pages jam.
•If “Page level” is selected, then rescan from the jammed
page forward.
Understanding the printer menus 188
Use To
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Location Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator
intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This
sounds three quick beeps.
•Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. This
means no alarm will sound.
•Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1‑180
Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is
printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
•30 is the factory default setting.
•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
•Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.
•Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Use To
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1–3 hr
6 hr
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month
Set the printer to operate at a low power state.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting in all countries.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active
Ethernet or a phone connection.
Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the printer display to a Ready state.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
Off
Set the printer to continue a specified job without returning to the
home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print
job.
Notes:
•90 is the factory default setting.
•When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
•Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
•40 is the factory default setting.
•Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This has no effect on PCL emulation
print jobs.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Use To
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
•30 is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Automatically reboot the printer back into the normal operation.
Note: “Reboot when idle” is the factory default setting.
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
•On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
•Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
•On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Use To
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Notes:
•Sleep is the factory default setting.
•Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
•If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off
and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
•Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the
printer control panel to exit Sleep mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the display is
completely off and the Sleep button turns amber and is
blinking.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Notes:
•Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
•Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
•If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off
and the Sleep button turns amber.
•Press and hold the Sleep button for three seconds or longer
to enter Hibernate mode.
•Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the
printer control panel to exit Sleep mode.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Notes:
•Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the
user‑defined settings.
•Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored
in flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Copy Settings menu
Copy Settings menu items and descriptions
Use To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and then to
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Notes:
•1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy
will also have print on one side.
•1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.
•2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.
•2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑up Portrait
4‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Landscape
Allow copying two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Specify whether or not a border is printed.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate
1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
•A4 is the international factory default setting.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the separator sheet source.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 194
Use To
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the standard bin to be used for the copy job.
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional bin is installed.
Number of Copies
1–999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:
•Top left
•Top middle
•Top right
•Bottom left
•Bottom middle
•Bottom right
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for the location.
•“All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 195
Use To
Auto Center
Off
On
Automatically center the content on the page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Sample Copy
Off
On
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use To
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
•Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Understanding the printer menus 196
Use To
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Notes:
•“Equal” is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
•“Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
•“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Caller ID
Off
Primary
Alternate
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to Mask”
setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 197
Use To
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]
Configure the fax cover page.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Fax Send Settings
Use To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 198
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•“Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
•“Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Understanding the printer menus 199
Use To
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX
Yes
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 200
Use To
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the
default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Use To
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multi‑Purpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
On
Enable two‑sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 201
Use To
Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify where the printer picks the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify a bin for received faxes.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Fax Footer
On
Off
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.
Notes:
•Fax is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
Off
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no fax ID specified.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 202
Fax Log Settings
Use To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or fax name returned.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin where fax logs are printed.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Speaker Settings
Use To
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Notes:
•“On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
fax connection is made.
•Always On turns the speaker on.
•Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Control the volume setting.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 203
Use To
Ringer Volume
Off
On
Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use To
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
Specify e‑mail server information.
Notes:
•The subject field has a limitation of 255 characters.
•The message field has a limitation of 512 characters.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes (KB).
Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Send a message when an e-mail is bigger than the configured size limit.
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.
Notes:
•E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
•The limit is one domain.
Understanding the printer menus 204
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
Define the e‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the scanned file.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a
Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Graphics
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 205
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.
Notes:
•A4 is the international factory default setting.
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Notes:
•“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 206
Use To
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page Tiff
On
Off
Choose between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a multiple-
page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or
multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 207
Use To
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On
Enable the use of the “cc:” and “bcc:” fields.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
FTP Settings menu
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a
Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 208
Use To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
•A4 is the international factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 209
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:
•“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether the transmission log prints.
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional bin is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 210
Use To
File Name Enter a base file name.
Note: The limitation is 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning
Off
On
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Understanding the printer menus 211
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A‑1a
Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 212
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•“Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
•“Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
•“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text or Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 213
Use To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies to all scan functions.
File Name Type a base file name.
Note: You can enter up to 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Print Settings
Use To
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 214
Use To
Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Collate
1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
•Long Edge sets binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge
for landscape).
•Short Edge sets binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left
edge for landscape).
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple pages are printed on one side of a sheet.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of pages that will print per side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Print multiple-page images on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in portrait or landscape
orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 215
Use To
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
“1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3.” If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,” then a blank page is inserted between
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to insert blank pages in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
•PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
•Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Job Waiting
On
Off
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When
the missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs
print.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if
the printer loses power.
Understanding the printer menus 216
Use To
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
•Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting. Whole
Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
•RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the
RAM is temporary.
•Storing downloads in the flash memory or in a printer hard
disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
the flash memory or in the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
•This menu appears only when a formatted, working flash
drive or printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save
On
Off
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
•On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not
deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always
appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Understanding the printer menus 217
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
•“1 sided” is the factory default setting.
•You can set two‑sided printing from the software program.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Notes:
•“1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2” is the factory default setting.
•“1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” stacks the print job in sequence.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3.” If Collate is set to ”1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,” then a blank
page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's
and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Understanding the printer menus 218
Use To
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Manual Feeder to
appear as a menu setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple pages on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of pages that will print per side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple pages when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in portrait
or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Use To
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 219
Use To
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally
or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–10
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Notes:
•8 is the factory default setting.
•Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >
Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh
users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
•To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner
by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer
hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Understanding the printer menus 220
Use To
Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Level
Off
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Understanding the printer menus 221
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
•Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
•Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
•No cancels the format request.
•Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
•The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
•This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Notes:
•Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
•Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
•When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 222
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
Off
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off
Disable the SysStart file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option
card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding the printer menus 223
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:
•“Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
•The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.
•“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
•10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
•A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
•12 is the factory default setting.
•Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
•Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•10 is the factory default setting.
•Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
•Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
•For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Understanding the printer menus 224
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size
and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
•“198 mm” is the factory default setting.
•The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays and feeders.
Notes:
•“Off” is the factory default setting.
•“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only
when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
•“0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding the printer menus 225
Use To
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Understanding the printer menus 226
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
•12 pt is the factory default setting.
•Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
•100% is the factory default setting.
•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
•19 mm is the factory default setting.
•Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
Off
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.
Invert
On
Off
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
•Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Understanding the printer menus 227
Use To
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 228
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
To quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, use Eco-Mode.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser/LED printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 88.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the
paper by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
•Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the
document will look like before you print it.
•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 256.
Saving money and the environment 229
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
•Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper •Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
•Turn off print log features.
3Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Saving money and the environment 230
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There will be a short delay before
the first page is printed.
Off Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode.
Select from 1 to 120 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode,
and then touch Submit.
Saving money and the environment 231
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are turned off safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” drop‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch Submit.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading from the display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Select from 20 to 100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 232
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness
2In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display, and then touch Submit.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
Saving money and the environment 233
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Saving money and the environment 234
Securing the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs,
as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Securing the printer 235
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these
steps:
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer restarts several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely
overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a printer hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar indicates the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer undergoes a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 236
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 237
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then click SELECT YOUR PRODUCT.
2From the “Search by Product Category” section, navigate to Software and Solutions > Other Applications.
3Click the Manuals tab, and then select the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide.
Securing the printer 238
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.
Cleaning the printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior
of the printer.
5Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Maintaining the printer 239
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2Open the scanner cover.
3Remove the white underside of the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 240
4Open the bottom ADF door.
1
2
5Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
6Close the bottom ADF door.
7Place the white underside of the scanner cover on the scanner glass, and then close the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 241
8Wipe the areas shown, and then let them dry.
4 1
3 2
1White underside of the scanner cover
2Scanner glass
3ADF glass
4White underside of the ADF cover
9Close the scanner cover.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Maintaining the printer 242
Ordering parts and supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact
the place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party
supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered
by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, the estimated cartridge yield is
based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
Ordering a toner cartridge
Notes:
•The estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
•Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.
Item Return Program cartridge
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 24B6015
Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of
toner.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name Lexmark Return Program
Imaging unit 24B6025
Maintaining the printer 243
Ordering a maintenance kit
To identify the supported fuser type, view the label on the fuser. Do either of the following:
•Remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on
the front of the fuser.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
•Pull down the printer rear door. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on the rear of the
fuser.
Notes:
•Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
•The separator roller, fuser, pick roller assembly, and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit and
can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
•For more information on replacing the parts included in the maintenance kit, see the instruction sheet that
came with each part.
Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kit type
Type Part number
XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 00 40X8420
XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 01 40X8421
XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 02 40X8422
XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 03 40X8423
XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 04 40X8424
Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kit type
Type Part number
XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 05 40X8425
XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 06 40X8426
XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 07 40X8427
XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 08 40X8428
XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 09 40X8429
Lexmark roller kit
Part number
XM5100 Series roller kit 40X7706
Lexmark ADF maintenance kit
Part number
XM5100 Series ADF maintenance kit 40X8431
Maintaining the printer 244
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
•Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 245
2Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle.
3Unpack the new toner cartridge, then remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to redistribute
the toner.
4Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the imaging unit exposed to direct
light for an extended period of time. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Maintaining the printer 246
5Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
1
2
Replacing the imaging unit
1Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 247
2Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle.
3Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
Maintaining the printer 248
4Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.
5Remove all packing material from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.
6Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows
on the side rails inside the printer.
Maintaining the printer 249
7Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
8Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 250
Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
•Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Maintaining the printer 251
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware
options.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 252
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings.
3From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Managing the printer 253
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
•Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
•All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can
be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.
•The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs
to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be
replaced to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Managing the printer 254
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 65.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 236.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Managing the printer 255
Clearing jams
Jam error messages appear on the printer display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred. When
there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
•Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
Clearing jams 256
•Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
•Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
•Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Notes:
•When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin
after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
•When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting reprints
jammed pages if adequate printer memory is available.
Clearing jams 257
8
7
6
5
3
4
1
2
Area Area name Printer control panel message What to do
1Upper rear door [x]‑page jam, open upper rear
door. [202]
Open the rear door of the printer, and then remove the
jammed paper.
2Upper door and rear
duplex area
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower
rear door. [231‑234]
Open the rear door of the printer and the rear duplex
area, and then remove the jammed paper.
3Trays [x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x] Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.
4Duplex area [x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear
duplex. [235–239]
Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex
flap down, and then remove the jammed paper.
5Multipurpose feeder [x]‑page jam, clear manual
feeder. [250]
Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and
then remove the jammed paper.
6Inside the printer [x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–201]
Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder,
then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit,
and then remove the jammed paper.
7Standard bin [x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203]
Remove all paper from the standard bin, and then
remove the jammed paper.
8Automatic document
feeder (ADF)
[x]page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove
the jammed paper.
Clearing jams 258
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2
1
2Lift the green handle, and then pull out the toner cartridge from the printer.
3Place the toner cartridge aside.
Clearing jams 259
4Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
1
2
5Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.
6Pull the jammed paper gently to the right, and then remove it from the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
12
Warning—Potential Damage: The jammed paper may be covered with toner, which can stain garments and
skin.
Clearing jams 260
7Install the imaging unit.
Note: Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide.
8Insert the toner cartridge into the printer, and then push the green handle back into place.
Notes:
•Align the arrows on the guides of the toner cartridge with the arrows in the printer.
•Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
Clearing jams 261
9Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
1
2
10 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1Pull down the rear door.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 262
3Close the rear door.
4From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1Pull down the rear door.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 263
3Close the rear door.
4Push the back of the standard tray.
5Press down the rear duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 264
2
1
6Insert the standard tray.
7From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]
1Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 265
2From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239]
1Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Lift the tray slightly, and then pull it out.
1
3
2
2Push down the front duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper to the right
and out of the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 266
1
2
3Insert the tray.
4From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]
1Check which tray is indicated on the printer display, and then pull the tray.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 267
3Insert the tray.
4From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250]
1From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 268
2Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
3Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.
4Slide the paper guide until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.
5From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 269
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
1Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.
2Open the ADF cover.
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4Close the ADF cover.
5Open the scanner cover.
6If the jam is in the bottom ADF door or ADF exit bin, then open the bottom ADF door, and then firmly grasp the
jammed paper on each side.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 270
1
2
7Close the bottom ADF door.
8Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper
guide.
9From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 271
Troubleshooting
Understanding printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 272
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•Cancel the print job.
Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the indicated tray.
4Reattach the tray.
5Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6Turn the printer back on.
If the error occurs again, then:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the tray.
4Contact customer support.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.
Close door or insert cartridge
The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly. Insert the cartridge, and then close all doors and covers.
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
•Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan
job.
•Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e-mailing.
•Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Troubleshooting 273
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Close top access cover
Close the printer top access cover to clear the message.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•Cancel current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
•The printer firmware has been updated.
•The tray for the print job has been removed.
•The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
•The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the defective flash memory card.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk full, scan job canceled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
Troubleshooting 274
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 275
Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.
Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.
Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the indicated tray.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
indicated tray.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel.
•Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
•Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
•Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
Troubleshooting 276
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Insert Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Insert the specified tray into the printer.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel.
Install duplex
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the duplex unit:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Install the duplex unit.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Restart the printer.
•Cancel the current job.
•Reset the active bin.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the specified tray:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Install the specified tray.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset the active bin.
Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.
Troubleshooting 277
Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job.
•Cancel the current print job.
Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.
Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper
source.
•Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 278
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or
feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default
paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray
or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from
the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 279
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and
continue printing.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If
necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and
continue printing.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
•Install additional printer memory.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after
the printer is restarted.
Troubleshooting 280
Memory full, cannot send faxes
1From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2Try one or more of the following:
•Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
•Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge, imaging unit, or fuser.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if
third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark
printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by
the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, touch
and hold and the # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue
printing.
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install
a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
Troubleshooting 281
•Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner
cartridge.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.
For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the
imaging unit.
Troubleshooting 282
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
•Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
•Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
Printer and toner cartridge regions
Region number Region
0Global
1 United States, Canada
2 European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3 Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4 Latin America
5 Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
9Invalid
Troubleshooting 283
Notes:
•The x and y values represent .xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel.
•The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
•Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
•Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
•Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
•Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative, and then report the message.
The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Replace missing fuser [80.xx]
1Install the missing fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 284
Replace separator pad
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the separator pad. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
•From the printer control panel, touch Ignore to clear the message.
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace wiper
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the fuser wiper in the printer.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
•From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.
Scan document too long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 285
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
•Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner maintenance required soon, use ADF Kit [80]
Contact customer support, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Serial option [x] error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
•Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and computer.
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
•Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
•From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Troubleshooting 286
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:
•Install the missing supply to complete the job.
•Cancel the current job.
Too many disks installed [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra printer hard disks.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many flash options installed [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra flash memory.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Troubleshooting 287
3Remove the extra trays.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
Replace with a supported paper size.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.
Unsupported camera mode, unplug camera and change mode
The camera mode does not support PictBridge.
Unplug the camera, change the mode and plug the camera back into the printer.
Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.
Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
USB port [x] disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Notes:
•The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Troubleshooting 288
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
•“Basic printer problems” on page 289
•“Hardware and internal option problems” on page 291
•“Paper feed problems” on page 294
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Press the Sleep button
to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted
in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Make sure to match the
following:
•The USB symbol on
the cable with the
USB symbol on the
printer
•The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port
Troubleshooting 289
Action Yes No
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 9. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing
material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Go to step 10. Turn off the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
on the printer.
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11. Use correct printer
driver settings.
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Go to step 12. Install the correct
printer driver.
Step 12
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 290
Printer display is blank
Action Yes No
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
Hardware and internal option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.
aTurn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet.
bMake sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
cConnect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3. Connect the internal
option to the controller
board.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is
listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
option.
Troubleshooting 291
Action Yes No
Step 4
aCheck if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 56.
bResend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reinstall the internal print server.
aRemove, and then install the internal print server. For more
information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 37.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print server
is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if the internal
print server is
supported by the
printer.
Note: An internal print
server from another
printer may not work
with this printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the internal print server connection.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected to the
internal print server.
Does the internal print server operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
aInstall the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 37.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported ISP.
Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Troubleshooting 292
Action Yes No
Step 2
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
aUse the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the ISP.
bCheck if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the
receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the
controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
bCheck if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aTurn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray working?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
more information, see
the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Troubleshooting 293
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
options in the printer driver” on page 56.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
aInstall the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 37.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface card.
Note: A USB or parallel
interface card from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the USB or parallel interface card.
Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
bFrom the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or
Auto.
cTouch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 294
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
bInsert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
aReview the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding
jams” on page 256.
bFollow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
aRemove any jammed paper.
bFrom the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 295
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Action Yes No
Step 1
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your
print job is listed.
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
Go to step 2. Select one of the Print
and Hold options, and
then resend the print
job. For more
information, see
“Printing confidential
and other held jobs” on
page 98.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•Delete the print job, and then send it again.
•For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
For Windows users
aOpen the Print Properties folder.
bFrom the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents”
check box.
cEnter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.
Does the job print?
The problem is solved. Add additional printer
memory.
Troubleshooting 296
Envelope seals when printing
Action Yes No
aUse envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the
flaps.
bResend the print job.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB
port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
into the front USB port.
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Wait until the printer is
ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
print the documents.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aCheck for an error message on the display.
bClear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 96.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 297
Incorrect characters print
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
bResend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the trays are not linked.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 298
Large jobs do not collate
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
bGenerate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aOpen the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
bClick File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 299
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aCheck if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the printer display.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5
aTurn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6
aRemove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 55.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 300
Print job takes longer than expected
Action Yes No
Step 1
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
bSelect Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
aRemove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aDisable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5
aCheck if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 301
Printing slows down
Notes:
•When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser
type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
bResend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aReplace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see
the instruction sheet that came with the part.
bResend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
•The trays can detect paper length.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aOpen the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.
•Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 302
Action Yes No
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
bIncrease the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
cResend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
The problem is solved. Check the original file
for manual page
breaks.
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Troubleshooting 303
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPrint a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported
by the printer.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
bUse a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you
want to use. For more information, contact your system support
person.
cResend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aUse a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you
want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your
system support person.
bResend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 304
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge.
2Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Compressed images appear on prints
Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser
type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
bResend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 305
Action Yes No
Step 2
aReplace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see
the instruction sheet that came with the part.
bResend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease the
toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.
aRemove the toner cartridge.
bRemove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
can cause print quality problems.
cInstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
dResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 306
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 307
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 308
Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
length guides.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aRemove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting 309
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging
unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Printer is printing solid black pages
Troubleshooting 310
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Print irregularities
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in
the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper size
and type from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 311
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.
The problem is solved.
Print is too dark
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 312
Action Yes No
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type, texture and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 313
Print is too light
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper type,
texture, and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 314
Action Yes No
Step 6
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Repeating defects appear on prints
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReplace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is equal
to any of the following:
•47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
•96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
•28.5 mm (1.12 in.)
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aReplace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal to either
of the following:
•94.25 mm (3.71 in.)
•95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 315
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Load paper with the
correct paper type and
weight in the tray.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified in
the tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Skewed print
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Troubleshooting 316
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aCheck if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Go to step 3. Change the paper type
and weight to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 317
Action Yes No
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Troubleshooting 318
Action Yes No
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.
The problem is solved.
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reinstall the imaging unit.
aRemove, and then install the imaging unit.
bResend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 319
Toner rubs off
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type
and weight.
Do the paper type and weight match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 2
Check if you are printing on paper that is heavy or has texture or rough
finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the Paper menu
on the printer control
panel, set the paper
texture.
Contact customer
support.
Toner specks appear on prints
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Transparency print quality is poor
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
aCheck if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
bResend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 320
Uneven print density
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 321
Action Yes No
Step 4
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Solving copy problems
•“Copier does not respond” on page 322
•“Partial document or photo copies” on page 323
•“Poor copy quality” on page 323
•“Scanner unit does not close” on page 325
Copier does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or status
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 3
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back
on.
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 322
Partial document or photo copies
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 2. Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3. Change the paper size
setting to match the
paper loaded in the
tray, or load the tray
with paper that
matches the paper size
setting.
Step 3
aSpecify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify
the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Poor copy quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or status
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution setting for a
higher‑quality output.
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF
glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 240.
Troubleshooting 323
Action Yes No
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
aFrom the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
bFrom the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
cIf the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 5. See “Print quality
problems” on
page 303.
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 6. Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Check for patterns on prints.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower
setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
bResend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Go to step 8. The problem is solved.
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
bAdjust the settings:
•Sharpness—Increase the current setting.
•Contrast—Increase the current setting.
cResend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Go to step 9. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 324
Action Yes No
Step 9
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
bAdjust the settings of the following:
•Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
•Shadow Detail—Reduce the current setting.
cResend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the
printer.
aLift the scanner unit.
bRemove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
cLower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Solving fax problems
•“Caller ID is not shown” on page 326
•“Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 326
•“Can receive but not send faxes” on page 328
•“Can send but not receive faxes” on page 329
•“Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 330
•“Received fax has poor print quality” on page 330
Troubleshooting 325
Caller ID is not shown
Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is
subscribed to the caller ID service.
Notes:
•If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may
have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
•The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
•Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or
switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Clear the error or status
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on the
display.
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
•Telephone
•Handset
•Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Go to step 5. Securely connect the
cables.
Troubleshooting 326
Action Yes No
Step 5
aCheck the telephone wall jack.
1Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2Listen for a dial tone.
3If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable
into the wall jack.
4If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable
into a different wall jack.
5If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected
to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
•If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the
printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-
interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
•If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will
support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.
•If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are
connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then
consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital
connector?
Go to step 7. Connect the printer to
an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
Go to step 8. •Try calling the fax
number to make
sure that it is
working properly.
•If the telephone
line is being used by
another device,
then wait until the
other device is
finished before
sending a fax.
•If you are using the
On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear a
dial tone.
Troubleshooting 327
Action Yes No
Step 8
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer
and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 9.
Step 9
aTemporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to
obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
Step 10
aTemporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact
your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
aDial the fax number.
bScan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Can receive but not send faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and
then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.
To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 328
Action Yes No
Step 2
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray
or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.
Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
•Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.
•Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Can send but not receive faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
bClick Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
cIn the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want
the phone to ring before the printer answers.
dClick Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 329
Action Yes No
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
•Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
•The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Action Yes No
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes >
Submit
bTurn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.
cSelect a language, and then touch .
dSelect a country or region, and then touch Next.
eSelect a time zone, and then touch Next.
fSelect Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Received fax has poor print quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
aCheck if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
bIncrease the fax scan resolution, if possible.
cResend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 330
Action Yes No
Step 2
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
bClick Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
cIn the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
•2400
•4800
•9600
•14400
•33600
dClick Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge,
and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Solving scanner problems
•“Cannot scan from a computer” on page 332
•“Partial document or photo scans” on page 332
•“Poor scanned image quality” on page 332
•“Scan job was not successful” on page 333
•“Scanner unit does not close” on page 334
•“Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 334
•“The scanner does not respond” on page 335
Troubleshooting 331
Cannot scan from a computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer
display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to
make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?
Contact customer
support.
Tighten the cable
connections.
Partial document or photo scans
Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Contact customer
support.
Load the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Poor scanned image quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution settings for a
higher‑quality output.
Troubleshooting 332
Action Yes No
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free cloth
dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 240.
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 5. Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
•From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
•From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
•When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 6. See “Print quality
problems” on
page 303.
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Problem solved. Contact customer
support.
Scan job was not successful
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the
computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Go to step 2. Connect the cables
properly.
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Change the file name. Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 333
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?
Close the file you are
scanning.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check
box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected
in the destination configuration settings?
Contact customer
support.
Select the Append time
stamp or Overwrite
existing file check box
in the destination
configuration settings.
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
aLift the scanner unit.
bRemove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
cLower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 334
The scanner does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 3. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment
and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not
work, then reconnect
the other electrical
equipment and then go
to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 335
Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer home screen.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
bClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.
cFrom the Filter menu, select an application status.
dFrom the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2. Contact customer
support.
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
View the printer IP address:
•From the printer home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Go to step 2. Type the correct
printer IP address in the
address field of your
Web browser.
Note: Depending on
the network settings,
you may need to type
“https://” instead of
“http://” before the
printer IP address to
access the Embedded
Web Server.
Step 2
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 3. Turn on the printer.
Troubleshooting 336
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if the network connection is working.
Is the network connection working?
Go to step 4. Contact your system
support person.
Step 4
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Go to step 5. Tighten the cable
connection.
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Are the Web proxy servers disabled?
Go to step 6. Contact your system
support person.
Step 6
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address
in the address field.
Did the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Contacting customer support
When you contact customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the printer control panel light
sequence, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you
solve common problems.
E-mail You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond
and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or
provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your
computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help
you successfully use your Lexmark product.
Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit the
Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 337
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark XM5163 and XM5170
Machine type:
7463
Model(s):
096, 296
Edition notice
September 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commerical Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 338
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices 339
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the documentation CD.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 58 dBA
Scanning 57 dBA
Copying 58 dBA
Ready 33 dBA
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 340
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Notices 341
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping and storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787-800 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Notices 342
Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 825 (XM5163); 925 (XM5170)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.
860 (XM5163); 960 (XM5170)
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 130
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 110 (Ready 1); 55 (Ready 2)
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 14 (XM5163); 15 (XM5170)
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.7
Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned
off.
0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions Disabled
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Notices 343
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and
1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment
and telecommunications terminal equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
Notices 344
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notices 345
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Notices 346
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
•There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
•The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
•The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line
which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all
analog telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden.
Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Notices 347
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
Notices 348
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Notices 349
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
LietuviųŠiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Notices 350
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
Notices 351
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Notices 352
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
Notices 353
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Notices 354
Index
Numerics
2100‑sheet tray
installing 50
loading paper 72
250‑sheet tray
installing 50
loading 66
550‑sheet tray
installing 50
loading 66
Symbols
[x]‑ page jam, open upper rear
door. [202] 262
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[250] 268
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–201] 259
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 270
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24x] 267
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower
rear door. [231–234] 263
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203] 265
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear
duplex. [235–239] 266
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 22
Active NIC menu 165
adapter plug 130
ADF
copying using 101
adjusting brightness
Embedded Web Server 232
printer display 232
adjusting copy quality 106
adjusting display brightness 232
adjusting Sleep mode 231
adjusting toner darkness 93
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 253
advanced options
copy options 112
e‑mail options 119
fax options 143
FTP options 151
answering machine
setting up 122
AppleTalk menu 170
applications
understanding 23
attaching cables 53
available internal options 29
avoiding jams 90
avoiding paper jams 256
B
blocking junk faxes 140
buttons, printer control panel 16
buttons, touch screen
using 19
C
cables
Ethernet 53
USB 53
canceling
print job, from computer 99
canceling a print job
from a computer 99
from the printer control panel 99
canceling an e-mail 117
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 336
Card Copy
setting up 24
card stock
loading 78
tips 85
Cartridge low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 273
Check tray [x] connection 273
checking an unresponsive
printer 289
checking status of parts and
supplies 242
checking the status of parts and
supplies 242
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 253
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 253
cleaning
exterior of the printer 239
scanner glass 240
cleaning the printer 239
Close door or insert cartridge 273
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 273
Close front door 274
Close top access cover 274
collate
copy options 111
collating copies 107
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 274
compressed images appear on
prints 305
confidential data
information on securing 238
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 98
confidential print jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
Confidential Print menu 180
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 274
configuration information
wireless network 59
Configure MP menu 153
Index 355
configuring
supply notifications, imaging
unit 254
supply notifications, maintenance
kit 254
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 254
configuring e‑mail settings 113
configuring port settings 62
configuring supply notifications 254
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 134
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal Identification
Number) method 61
using Push Button Configuration
method 61
using the Embedded Web
Server 61
using wireless setup wizard 60
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 232
conserving supplies 229
Eco‑Mode 230
Hibernate mode 232
Quiet Mode 230
Sleep mode 231
conserving supplies 229
contacting customer support 337
content
e‑mail settings 118
content source
e‑mail settings 118
fax options 141
content type
e‑mail settings 118
fax options 141
control panel, printer 16
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
controller board
accessing 30
copies
copy options 111
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 110
using the scanner glass 110
copy options
advanced options 112
collate 111
copies 111
darkness 111
Save As Shortcut 112
sides (duplex) 111
copy quality
adjusting 106
copy screen
content source 111
content type 111
options 110, 111
Copy Settings menu 193
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 322
partial document or photo
copies 323
poor copy quality 323
poor scanned image quality 332
scanner unit does not
close 325, 334
copying
adding an overlay message 109
adjusting quality 106
canceling a copy job 110
collating copies 107
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 103
custom job 108
different paper sizes 104
enlarging 106
inserting a header or footer 109
multiple pages on one sheet 108
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 105
on letterhead 103
on transparencies 102
photos 102
placing separator sheets between
copies 107
quick copy 101
reducing 106
selecting a tray 104
to a different size 104
using the ADF 101
using the scanner glass 102
copying different paper sizes 104
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 108
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 105
copying on transparencies 102
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 138
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 144
Custom Names menu 162
custom paper type
assigning 83
custom paper type name
creating 83
Custom Scan Sizes menu 163
Custom Type [x]
changing name 83
Custom Types menu 162
customer support
contacting 337
D
darkness
copy options 111
e‑mail options 118
fax options 142
scan options 150
date and time, fax
setting 135
daylight saving time, setting 135
Default Source menu 153
Defective flash detected [51] 274
delayed send
fax options 143
device and network settings
information
erasing 236
different paper sizes, copying 104
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
fax setup 126
digital telephone service
fax setup 128
directory list
printing 99
Disk full 62 274
Disk full, scan job canceled 274
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 275
disk wiping 236
Disk Wiping menu 181
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 291
display, printer control panel 16
adjusting brightness 232
disposing of printer hard disk 235
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 134
Index 356
documents, printing
from Macintosh 93
from Windows 93
DSL filter 126
duplexing 105
E
Eco‑Mode setting 230
Edit Security Setups menu 178
embedded solutions information
erasing 236
Embedded Web Server
accessing 22
administrator settings 253
checking the status of parts 242
checking the status of
supplies 242
creating a fax destination
shortcut 138
creating an FTP shortcut 144
creating e‑mail shortcuts 114
initial fax setup 121
modifying confidential print
settings 98
networking settings 253
problem accessing 336
scanning to a computer using 147
setting up e‑mail alerts 253
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 238, 253
emission notices 340, 344, 348, 349
encrypting the printer hard
disk 237
enlarging a copy 106
envelopes
loading 78
tips on using 85
environmental settings
conserving supplies 229
display brightness, adjusting 232
Eco‑Mode 230
Hibernate mode 232
Quiet Mode 230
Sleep mode 231
erasing non‑volatile memory 236
erasing printer hard disk
memory 236
erasing volatile memory 235
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 275
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 275
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 57
Ethernet network setup
using Macintosh 58
using Windows 58
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 58
Windows 58
Ethernet port 53
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 57
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 27
EXT port 53
exterior of the printer
cleaning 239
e‑mail
canceling 117
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 253
paper jam 253
setting up 253
e‑mail function
setting up 113
e‑mail options
advanced options 119
darkness 118
message 117
original size 118
page setup 119
recipient(s) 117
resolution 118
Save As Shortcut 117
send as 118
subject 117
e‑mail screen
options 117, 119
E‑mail Settings menu 204
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 114
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 115
using the address book 116
e‑mailing
adding message line 116
adding subject line 116
changing output file type 116
configuring e‑mail settings 113
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 114
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 114
setting up e‑mail function 113
using a shortcut number 115
using the address book 116
using the printer control
panel 115
F
factory defaults
restoring 255
fax
sending 136, 137
sending at a scheduled time 137
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 330
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 330
fax log
viewing 139
Fax memory full 275
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 196
fax name, setting 134
fax number, setting 134
fax options
advanced options 143
content source 141
content type 141
darkness 142
delayed send 143
page setup 142
resolution 142
scan preview 143
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 275
fax port 53
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 275
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 130
digital telephone service 128
DSL connection 126
standard telephone line
connection 122
VoIP 127
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system administrator. 276
Index 357
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system administrator. 276
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 326
can receive but not send
faxes 328
can send but not receive
faxes 329
cannot send or receive a fax 326
received fax has poor print
quality 330
faxing
blocking junk faxes 140
canceling a fax job 140
changing resolution 139
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 135
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 138
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 138
distinctive ring service 134
fax setup 121
forwarding faxes 141
holding faxes 140
making a fax lighter or darker 139
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 137
sending using the printer control
panel 135
setting the date and time 135
setting the fax number 134
setting the outgoing fax name 134
viewing a fax log 139
FCC notices 340, 344, 348
file name
scan options 149
finding printer IP address 21
Finishing menu 218
firmware card 29
flash drive
printing from 95
Flash Drive menu 212
flash drives
supported file types 96
font sample list
printing 99
Forms and Favorites
setting up 23
forwarding faxes 141
FTP
FTP options 149
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 145
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut number 146
using the printer control
panel 145
FTP options
advanced options 151
FTP 149
FTP Settings menu 208
G
General Settings menu 183
green settings
Eco‑Mode 230
Hibernate mode 232
Quiet Mode 230
H
held jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
Help menu 228
Hibernate mode
using 232
hiding icons on the home screen 22
holding faxes 140
home screen
customizing 22
hiding icons 22
showing icons 22
home screen applications
configuring 23
finding information 23
home screen buttons and icons
description 17
HTML menu 226
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 22
showing 22
Image menu 227
imaging unit
ordering 243
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 276
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 276
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 276
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 27
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 276
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 276
individual settings information
erasing 236
initial fax setup 121
using the Embedded Web
Server 121
Insert Tray [x] 277
inserting a header or footer 109
Install duplex 277
Install Tray [x] 277
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 37
installing an optional card 35
installing options
order of installation 50
installing printer hard disk 42
installing printer on a network
Ethernet networking 58
installing printer software
adding options 56
installing printer software
(Windows) 55
installing the 2100‑sheet tray 50
installing the 250‑sheet tray 50
installing the 550‑sheet tray 50
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 277
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 278
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 278
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 278
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 278
internal options 29
internal print server
troubleshooting 292
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 62
installing 37
troubleshooting 292
IP address of computer
finding 21
IP address, printer
finding 21
Index 358
IPv6 menu 169
J
jams
accessing 257
avoiding 256
messages 257
jams, clearing
behind rear door 263
duplex 266
in automatic document feeder top
cover 270
in manual feeder 268
in tray [x] 267
inside the printer 259
rear door 262
standard bin jam 265
Job Accounting menu 220
L
labels, paper
tips 86
letterhead
copying on 103
loading, 2100‑sheet tray 72
loading, multipurpose
feeder 78, 86
loading, trays 66, 86
light, indicator 16
line filter 126
LINE port 53
linking trays 82, 83
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 279
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 280
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 280
loading
card stock 78
envelopes 78
letterhead in 2100‑sheet tray 72
letterhead in multipurpose
feeder 78
letterhead in trays 66
multipurpose feeder 78
transparencies 78
loading letterhead
paper orientation 86
loading paper
2100‑sheet tray 72
250‑sheet tray 66
550‑sheet tray 66
M
maintenance kit
ordering 244
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 280
making copies using paper from
selected tray 104
memory
types installed on printer 235
memory card 29
installing 33
Memory full [38] 280
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 280
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 281
menu settings page
printing 65
menus
Active NIC 165
AppleTalk 170
Confidential Print 180
Configure MP 153
Copy Settings 193
Custom Names 162
Custom Scan Sizes 163
Custom Types 162
Default Source 153
diagram of 152
Disk Wiping 181
Edit Security Setups 178
E‑mail Settings 204
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 196
Finishing 218
Flash Drive 212
FTP Settings 208
General Settings 183
Help 228
HTML 226
Image 227
IPv6 169
Job Accounting 220
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 179
Network [x] 166
Network Card 167
Network Reports 167
Paper Loading 161
Paper Size/Type 154
Paper Texture 157
Paper Weight 159
Parallel [x] 172
PCL Emul 224
PDF 223
PostScript 223
Quality 219
Reports 164
Security Audit Log 181
Serial [x] 174
Set Date/Time 182
Settings 216
SMTP Setup 177
Standard Network 166
Standard USB 171
Substitute Size 157
TCP/IP 168
Universal Setup 163
Utilities 222
Wireless 170
XPS 223
menus diagram 152
message
e‑mail options 117
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 179
mobile device
printing from 94
moving the printer 11, 251, 252
Multi Send
adding a profile 25
setting up 25
multipurpose feeder
loading 78
Index 359
MyShortcut
about 25
N
Network [x] menu 166
Network [x] software error
[54] 281
Network Card menu 167
Network Reports menu 167
network settings
Embedded Web Server 253
network setup page
printing 65
Networking Guide
where to find 253
No analog phone line connected to
modem, fax is disabled. 281
noise emission levels 340
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 281
non‑volatile memory 235
erasing 236
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 281
notices 339, 340, 341, 342, 343,
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 350
number of remaining pages
estimate 243
O
optional card
installing 35
options
2100‑sheet tray, installing 50
250‑sheet tray, installing 50
550‑sheet tray, installing 50
firmware cards 29
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 37
memory card 29, 33
printer hard disk, installing 42
printer hard disk, removing 48
updating in printer driver 56
options, copy screen
copy from 110
scale 111
options, touch‑screen
copy 110
e‑mail 117, 119
ordering
imaging unit 243
maintenance kit 244
ordering supplies
toner cartridge 243
organizing cables 53
original size
e‑mail options 118
scan options 150
output file type
changing 116
P
page setup
e‑mail options 119
fax options 142
scan options 150
paper
characteristics 87
different sizes, copying 104
letterhead 88
preprinted forms 88
recycled 88
saving 108
selecting 88
storing 87, 90
unacceptable 88
Universal size setting 66
using recycled 229
Paper changes needed 282
paper characteristics 87
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 295
paper jams
avoiding 256
paper jams, clearing
behind rear door 263
duplex 266
in automatic document feeder top
cover 270
in manual feeder 268
in tray [x] 267
inside the printer 259
standard bin jam 265
upper rear door 262
Paper Loading menu 161
paper size
setting 66
Paper Size/Type menu 154
paper sizes
supported by the printer 90
Paper Texture menu 157
paper type
setting 66
paper types
supported by printer 92
Paper Weight menu 159
paper weights
supported by printer 92
Parallel [x] menu 172
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 282
parts
checking status 242
checking, from printer control
panel 242
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 242
using genuine Lexmark 243
PCL Emul menu 224
PDF menu 223
Personal Identification Number
method
using 61
phone splitter 127
photos
copying 102
placing separator sheets between
copies 107
port settings
configuring 62
PostScript menu 223
power cord socket 53
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 57
print irregularities 311
print job
canceling, from computer 99
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 240
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 309
characters have jagged edges 303
clipped pages or images 304
compressed images appear on
prints 305
gray background on prints 306
horizontal voids appear on
prints 307
print irregularities 311
print is too dark 312
print is too light 314
printer is printing solid black
pages 310
Index 360
repeating defects appear on
prints 315
shadow images appear on
prints 316
skewed print 316
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 317
streaked vertical lines 318
toner fog or background
shading 319
toner rubs off 320
toner specks appear on prints 320
transparency print quality is
poor 320
uneven print density 321
white streaks 321
print troubleshooting
envelope seals when printing 297
error reading flash drive 297
held jobs do not print 296
incorrect characters print 298
incorrect margins on prints 308
jammed pages are not
reprinted 294
job prints from wrong tray 298
job prints on wrong paper 298
jobs do not print 300
Large jobs do not collate 299
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 299
paper curl 309
paper frequently jams 295
print job takes longer than
expected 301
tray linking does not work 302
unexpected page breaks
occur 303
printer
basic model 12
fully configured 12
minimum clearances 11
moving 11, 251, 252
selecting a location 11
shipping 252
printer configurations 12
printer control panel 16
factory defaults, restoring 255
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
Printer had to restart. Last job may
be incomplete. 282
printer hard disk
disposing of 235
encrypting 237
installing 42
removing 48
wiping 236
printer hard disk encryption 237
printer hard disk memory
erasing 236
printer IP address
finding 21
printer is printing blank pages 309
printer messages
[x]‑ page jam, open upper rear
door. [202] 262
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[250] 268
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–
201] 259
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 270
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24x] 267
[x]‑page jam, open upper and
lower rear door. [231–234] 263
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203] 265
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to
clear duplex. [235–239] 266
Cartridge low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 273
Check tray [x] connection 273
Close door or insert cartridge 273
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 273
Close front door 274
Close top access cover 274
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 274
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 274
Defective flash detected [51] 274
Disk full 62 274
Disk full, scan job canceled 274
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 275
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 275
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 275
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 275
Fax memory full 275
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 275
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 275
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 276
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 276
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 276
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 276
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 276
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 276
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 276
Insert Tray [x] 277
Install duplex 277
Install Tray [x] 277
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 277
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 278
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 278
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 278
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 278
Index 361
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name [paper
orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 279
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 280
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 280
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 280
Memory full [38] 280
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 280
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 281
Network [x] software error
[54] 281
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 281
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 281
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 281
Paper changes needed 282
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 282
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 282
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 282
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 282
Remove defective disk [61] 283
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 283
Remove paper from standard
output bin 283
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 283
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 283
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 283
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 284
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 284
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 284
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 284
Replace missing fuser [80.xx] 284
Replace separator pad 285
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 285
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 285
Replace wiper 285
Restore held jobs? 285
Scan document too long 285
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 285
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 285
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 286
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 286
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 286
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 286
Serial option [x] error [54] 286
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 286
Some held jobs were not
restored 286
Standard network software error
[54] 287
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 287
Supply needed to complete
job 287
Too many disks installed [58] 287
Too many flash options installed
[58] 287
Too many trays attached [58] 287
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 288
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 288
Unsupported camera mode,
unplug camera and change
mode 288
Unsupported disk 288
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 288
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 275
USB port [x] disabled [56] 288
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 289
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 291
internal print server 292
Internal Solutions Port 292
tray problems 293
USB/parallel interface card 294
printer parts
controller board 30
printer problems, solving basic 289
printer security
information on 238
printer software, installing
(Windows) 55
printing
canceling, from printer control
panel 99
directory list 99
font sample list 99
forms 93
from a mobile device 94
from flash drive 95
from Macintosh 93
from Windows 93
menu settings page 65
network setup page 65
printing a directory list 99
printing a document 93
printing a font sample list 99
printing a menu settings page 65
printing a network setup page 65
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 98
from Windows 98
printing forms 93
Index 362
printing from a flash drive 95
printing from a mobile device 94
printing slows down 302
Push Button Configuration method
using 61
Q
Quality menu 219
Quiet Mode 230
R
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 117
recycled paper
using 88, 229
recycling
Lexmark packaging 233
Lexmark products 233
toner cartridges 233
reducing a copy 106
reducing noise 230
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 282
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 282
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 27
Remove defective disk [61] 283
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 283
Remove paper from standard
output bin 283
removing printer hard disk 48
repeat print jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
repeating defects appear on
prints 315
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 283
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 283
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 283
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 284
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 284
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 284
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 284
Replace missing fuser [80.xx] 284
Replace separator pad 285
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 285
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 285
Replace wiper 285
replacing the toner
cartridge 245, 247
reports
viewing 253
Reports menu 164
reserve print jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
resolution
e‑mail options 118
fax options 142
scan options 150
resolution, fax
changing 139
Restore held jobs? 285
restoring factory default
settings 255
RJ‑11 adapter 130
S
safety information 8, 9
Save As Shortcut
copy options 112
e‑mail options 117
scan options 149
saving paper 108
Scan document too long 285
scan options
darkness 150
file name 149
original size 150
page setup 150
resolution 150
Save As Shortcut 149
Scan Preview 151
send as 150
Scan Preview
scan options 151
scan preview
fax options 143
scan screen
content source 150
content type 150
Scan to Computer
setting up 148
Scan to Network
setting up 26
using 144
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 332
partial document or photo
scans 332
scan job was not successful 333
scanner unit does not
close 325, 334
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 334
scanner
Automatic document feeder
(ADF) 15
functions 14
scanner glass 15
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 285
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 285
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 286
scanner glass
cleaning 240
copying using 102
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 286
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 286
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 286
scanning
from a flash drive 149
quick copy 101
to a computer 148
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 147
to an FTP address 145, 146
scanning to a computer 148
using the Embedded Web
Server 147
scanning to a flash drive 149
Index 363
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 144
using a shortcut number 146
using the address book 146
using the printer control
panel 145
scanning to network
destinations 144
security
modifying confidential print
settings 98
Security Audit Log menu 181
security settings information
erasing 236
security Web page
where to find 238
selecting a location for the
printer 11
selecting paper 88
send as
e‑mail options 118
scan options 150
sending a fax 136
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 135
sending an e‑mail using the printer
control panel 115
sending fax
using shortcuts 136
using the address book 137
sending fax at a scheduled
time 137
sending fax using the address
book 137
Serial [x] menu 174
Serial option [x] error [54] 286
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 286
serial printing
setting up 63
Set Date/Time menu 182
setting
paper size 66
paper type 66
TCP/IP address 168
setting the fax number 134
setting the outgoing fax name 134
setting Universal paper size 66
setting up e‑mail alerts 253
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 130
digital telephone service 128
DSL connection 126
standard telephone line
connection 122
VoIP connection 127
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 330
setting up serial printing 63
setting up the printer
on an Ethernet network
(Macintosh only) 58
on an Ethernet network (Windows
only) 58
Settings menu 216
shipping the printer 252
shortcuts, creating
copy screen 103
e‑mail 114
fax destination 138
FTP address 145
FTP destination 144
showing icons on the home
screen 22
sides (duplex)
copy options 111
Sleep mode
adjusting 231
SMTP Setup menu 177
Some held jobs were not
restored 286
Standard Network menu 166
Standard network software error
54] 287
Standard USB menu 171
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 287
statement of volatility 235
status of parts
checking 242
status of supplies
checking 242
storing
paper 90
supplies 245
storing print jobs 97
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 317
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 318
streaks appear 321
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 116
Substitute Size menu 157
supplies
checking status 242
checking, from printer control
panel 242
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 242
conserving 229
storing 245
using genuine Lexmark 243
using recycled paper 229
supplies, ordering
imaging unit 243
maintenance kit 244
toner cartridge 243
Supply needed to complete job 287
supply notifications
configuring 254
supported flash drives 96
supported paper sizes 90
supported paper types 92
supported paper weights 92
T
TCP/IP menu 168
telecommunication
notices 344, 346, 347
the scanner does not respond 335
tips
card stock 85
labels, paper 86
on using envelopes 85
on using letterhead 86
transparencies 87
tips on using envelopes 85
tips on using letterhead 86
toner cartridge
ordering 243
replacing 245, 247
toner cartridges
recycling 233
toner darkness
adjusting 93
Too many disks installed [58] 287
Too many flash options installed
[58] 287
Too many trays attached [58] 287
touch screen
buttons 19
transparencies
copying on 102
loading 78
tips 87
Index 364
tray
loading 66
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 288
trays
linking 82, 83
unlinking 82, 83
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 336
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 336
checking an unresponsive
printer 289
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 330
solving basic printer
problems 289
the scanner does not respond 335
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 322
partial document or photo
copies 323
poor copy quality 323
poor scanned image quality 332
scanner unit does not
close 325, 334
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 291
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 326
can receive but not send
faxes 328
can send but not receive
faxes 329
cannot send or receive a fax 326
received fax has poor print
quality 330
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 295
troubleshooting, print
envelope seals when printing 297
error reading flash drive 297
held jobs do not print 296
incorrect characters print 298
incorrect margins on prints 308
jammed pages are not
reprinted 294
job prints from wrong tray 298
job prints on wrong paper 298
jobs do not print 300
Large jobs do not collate 299
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 299
paper curl 309
paper frequently jams 295
print job takes longer than
expected 301
tray linking does not work 302
unexpected page breaks
occur 303
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 309
characters have jagged edges 303
clipped pages or images 304
compressed images appear on
prints 305
gray background on prints 306
horizontal voids appear on
prints 307
print irregularities 311
print is too dark 312
print is too light 314
printer is printing solid black
pages 310
repeating defects appear on
prints 315
shadow images appear on
prints 316
skewed print 316
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 317
streaked vertical lines 318
toner fog or background
shading 319
toner rubs off 320
toner specks appear on prints 320
transparency print quality is
poor 320
uneven print density 321
white streaks on a page 321
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 291
internal print server 292
Internal Solutions Port 292
tray problems 293
USB/parallel interface card 294
troubleshooting, printing
printing slows down 302
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 332
partial document or photo
scans 332
scan job was not successful 333
scanner unit does not
close 325, 334
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 334
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 17
uneven print density 321
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 288
Universal Paper Size
setting 66
Universal Setup menu 163
unlinking trays 82, 83
Unsupported camera mode, unplug
camera and change mode 288
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 288
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 275
updating options in printer
driver 56
USB port 53
USB port [x] disabled [56] 288
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 294
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 146
using Forms and Favorites 93
using Hibernate mode 232
using recycled paper 229
using shortcuts
sending fax 136
using the address book 116
sending fax 137
using the touch‑screen buttons 19
Utilities menu 222
V
verify print jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
vertical voids appear 321
viewing
reports 253
viewing a fax log 139
Index 365
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 253
voice mail
setting up 122
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
fax setup 127
voids appear 321
VoIP adapter 127
volatile memory 235
erasing 235
volatility
statement of 235
W
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 289
wiping the printer hard disk 236
Wireless menu 170
wireless network
configuration information 59
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 61
wireless setup wizard
using 60
X
XPS menu 223
Index 366

Navigation menu